Set NOPIE_CFLAGS and NOPIE_LDFLAGS
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 @kindex -Ur
977 @cindex constructors
978 @item -Ur
979 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
981 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
982 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986 @samp{-r} for the others.
987
988 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996 in a linker script.
997
998 @kindex -v
999 @kindex -V
1000 @kindex --version
1001 @cindex version
1002 @item -v
1003 @itemx --version
1004 @itemx -V
1005 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1006 lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008 @kindex -x
1009 @kindex --discard-all
1010 @cindex deleting local symbols
1011 @item -x
1012 @itemx --discard-all
1013 Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015 @kindex -X
1016 @kindex --discard-locals
1017 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1018 @item -X
1019 @itemx --discard-locals
1020 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1023
1024 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026 @cindex symbol tracing
1027 @item -y @var{symbol}
1028 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031 to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1037 @item -Y @var{path}
1038 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039 for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042 @item -z @var{keyword}
1043 The recognized keywords are:
1044 @table @samp
1045
1046 @item combreloc
1047 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048 lookup caching possible.
1049
1050 @item defs
1051 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1052 shared libraries are still allowed.
1053
1054 @item execstack
1055 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
1057 @item global
1058 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
1062 @item initfirst
1063 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068 objects.
1069
1070 @item interpose
1071 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072 but the primary executable.
1073
1074 @item lazy
1075 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078 Lazy binding is the default.
1079
1080 @item loadfltr
1081 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082 runtime.
1083
1084 @item muldefs
1085 Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087 @item nocombreloc
1088 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090 @item nocopyreloc
1091 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1093
1094 @item nodefaultlib
1095 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096 ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098 @item nodelete
1099 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101 @item nodlopen
1102 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104 @item nodump
1105 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
1107 @item noexecstack
1108 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
1110 @item text
1111 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113 @item notext
1114 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116 @item textoff
1117 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
1119 @item norelro
1120 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
1122 @item now
1123 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127 first called.
1128
1129 @item origin
1130 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
1132 @item relro
1133 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
1135 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
1141 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1142 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
1146 @item bndplt
1147 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
1149 @item noextern-protected-data
1150 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1151 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1152 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1153 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1154 module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1155 i386 and x86-64.
1156
1157 @end table
1158
1159 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1160
1161 @kindex -(
1162 @cindex groups of archives
1163 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1164 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1165 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1166 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1167
1168 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1169 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1170 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1171 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1172 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1173 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1174 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1175 resolved.
1176
1177 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1178 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1179 more archives.
1180
1181 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1182 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1183 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1184 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1185 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1186 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1187 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1188 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1189 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1190 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1191 restore the old behaviour.
1192
1193 @kindex --as-needed
1194 @kindex --no-as-needed
1195 @item --as-needed
1196 @itemx --no-as-needed
1197 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1198 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1199 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1200 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1201 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1202 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1203 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1204 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1205 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1206 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1207 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1208 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1209 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1210
1211 @kindex --add-needed
1212 @kindex --no-add-needed
1213 @item --add-needed
1214 @itemx --no-add-needed
1215 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1216 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1217 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1218 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1219
1220 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1221 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1222 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1223
1224 @kindex -Bdynamic
1225 @kindex -dy
1226 @kindex -call_shared
1227 @item -Bdynamic
1228 @itemx -dy
1229 @itemx -call_shared
1230 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1231 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1232 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1233 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1234 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1235 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1236
1237 @kindex -Bgroup
1238 @item -Bgroup
1239 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1240 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1241 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1242 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1243 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1244
1245 @kindex -Bstatic
1246 @kindex -dn
1247 @kindex -non_shared
1248 @kindex -static
1249 @item -Bstatic
1250 @itemx -dn
1251 @itemx -non_shared
1252 @itemx -static
1253 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1254 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1255 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1256 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1257 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1258 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1259 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1260 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1261 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1262 libraries.
1263
1264 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1265 @item -Bsymbolic
1266 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1267 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1268 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1269 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1270 platforms which support shared libraries.
1271
1272 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1273 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1274 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1275 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1276 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1277 libraries.
1278
1279 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1280 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1281 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1282 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1283 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1284 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1285 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1286 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1287 which support shared libraries.
1288
1289 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1290 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1291
1292 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1293 @item --dynamic-list-data
1294 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1295
1296 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1297 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1298 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1299 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1300
1301 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1302 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1303 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1304
1305 @kindex --check-sections
1306 @kindex --no-check-sections
1307 @item --check-sections
1308 @itemx --no-check-sections
1309 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1310 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1311 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1312 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1313 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1314 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1315 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1316 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1317 option.
1318
1319 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1320 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1321 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1322 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1323 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1324 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1325 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1326 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1327 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1328 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1329 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1330 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1331
1332 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1333 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1334 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1335 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1336 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1337 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1338 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1339 symbols.
1340
1341 @cindex cross reference table
1342 @kindex --cref
1343 @item --cref
1344 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1345 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1346 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1347
1348 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1349 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1350 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1351 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1352 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1353 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1354 symbol are listed.
1355
1356 @cindex common allocation
1357 @kindex --no-define-common
1358 @item --no-define-common
1359 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1360 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1361 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1362
1363 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1364 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1365 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1366 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1367 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1368 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1369 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1370 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1371 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1372 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1373
1374 @cindex symbols, from command line
1375 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1376 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1377 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1378 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1379 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1380 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1381 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1382 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1383 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1384 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1385 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1386 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1387
1388 @cindex demangling, from command line
1389 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1390 @kindex --no-demangle
1391 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1392 @itemx --no-demangle
1393 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1394 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1395 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1396 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1397 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1398 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1399 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1400 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1401 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1402
1403 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1404 @kindex -I@var{file}
1405 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1406 @item -I@var{file}
1407 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1408 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1409 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1410 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1411 doing.
1412
1413 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1414 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1415 @item --fatal-warnings
1416 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1417 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1418 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1419
1420 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1421 @item --force-exe-suffix
1422 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1423
1424 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1425 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1426 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1427 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1428 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1429 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1430
1431 @kindex --gc-sections
1432 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1433 @cindex garbage collection
1434 @item --gc-sections
1435 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1436 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1437 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1438 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1439 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1440 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1441 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1442
1443 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1444 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1445 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1446 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1447 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1448 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1449 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1450 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1451 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1452
1453 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1454 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1455 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1456 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1457
1458 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1459 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1460 @cindex garbage collection
1461 @item --print-gc-sections
1462 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1463 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1464 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1465 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1466 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1467 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1468 line.
1469
1470 @kindex --print-output-format
1471 @cindex output format
1472 @item --print-output-format
1473 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1474 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1475 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1476
1477 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1478 @cindex memory usage
1479 @item --print-memory-usage
1480 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1481 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1482 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1483 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1484 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1485
1486 @smallexample
1487 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1488 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1489 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1490 @end smallexample
1491
1492 @cindex help
1493 @cindex usage
1494 @kindex --help
1495 @item --help
1496 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1497
1498 @kindex --target-help
1499 @item --target-help
1500 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1501
1502 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1503 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1504 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1505 @option{-M} option, above.
1506
1507 @cindex memory usage
1508 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1509 @item --no-keep-memory
1510 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1511 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1512 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1513 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1514 while linking a large executable.
1515
1516 @kindex --no-undefined
1517 @kindex -z defs
1518 @item --no-undefined
1519 @itemx -z defs
1520 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1521 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1522 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1523 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1524 libraries being linked in.
1525
1526 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1527 @kindex -z muldefs
1528 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1529 @itemx -z muldefs
1530 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1531 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1532 first definition will be used.
1533
1534 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1535 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1536 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1537 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1538 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1539 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1540 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1541 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1542 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1543
1544 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1545 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1546 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1547 a shared library.
1548
1549 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1550 libraries specified at link time are that:
1551
1552 @itemize @bullet
1553 @item
1554 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1555 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1556 resolvable at load time.
1557 @item
1558 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1559 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1560
1561 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1562 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1563 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1564 appropriate memset function.
1565 @end itemize
1566
1567 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1568 @item --no-undefined-version
1569 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1570 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1571 will be issued instead.
1572
1573 @kindex --default-symver
1574 @item --default-symver
1575 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1576 exported symbols.
1577
1578 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1579 @item --default-imported-symver
1580 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1581 imported symbols.
1582
1583 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1584 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1585 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1586 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1587 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1588 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1589 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1590 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1591 inappropriate.
1592
1593 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1594 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1595 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1596 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1597
1598 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1599 @item --no-whole-archive
1600 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1601 archive files.
1602
1603 @cindex output file after errors
1604 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1605 @item --noinhibit-exec
1606 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1607 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1608 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1609 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1610
1611 @kindex -nostdlib
1612 @item -nostdlib
1613 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1614 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1615 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1616
1617 @ifclear SingleFormat
1618 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1619 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1620 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1621 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1622 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1623 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1624 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1625 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1626 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1627 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1628 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1629 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1630 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1631 @end ifclear
1632
1633 @kindex -pie
1634 @kindex --pic-executable
1635 @item -pie
1636 @itemx --pic-executable
1637 @cindex position independent executables
1638 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1639 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1640 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1641 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1642 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1643 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1644
1645 @kindex -qmagic
1646 @item -qmagic
1647 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1648
1649 @kindex -Qy
1650 @item -Qy
1651 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1652
1653 @kindex --relax
1654 @cindex synthesizing linker
1655 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1656 @cindex --no-relax
1657 @item --relax
1658 @itemx --no-relax
1659 An option with machine dependent effects.
1660 @ifset GENERIC
1661 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1662 @end ifset
1663 @ifset H8300
1664 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1665 @end ifset
1666 @ifset I960
1667 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1668 @end ifset
1669 @ifset XTENSA
1670 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1671 @end ifset
1672 @ifset M68HC11
1673 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1674 @end ifset
1675 @ifset NIOSII
1676 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1677 @end ifset
1678 @ifset POWERPC
1679 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1680 @end ifset
1681
1682 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1683 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1684 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1685 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1686 instructions, and combining constant values.
1687
1688 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1689 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1690 @ifset GENERIC
1691 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1692 family of processors.
1693 @end ifset
1694
1695 @ifset GENERIC
1696 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1697 but ignored.
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1701 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1702
1703 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1704 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1705 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1706 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1707 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1708 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1709 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1710 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1711 @ifset GENERIC
1712 (such as VxWorks)
1713 @end ifset
1714 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1715 run-time memory.
1716
1717 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1718 or symbols needed for relocations.
1719
1720 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1721 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1722
1723 @ifset GENERIC
1724 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1725 @cindex runtime library search path
1726 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1727 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1728 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1729 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1730 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1731 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1732 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1733 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1734 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1735 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1736
1737 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1738 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1739 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1740 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1741 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1742 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1743 file systems.
1744
1745 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1746 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1747 the @option{-rpath} option.
1748 @end ifset
1749
1750 @ifset GENERIC
1751 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1752 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1753 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1754 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1755 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1756 of the input files.
1757
1758 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1759 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1760 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1761 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1762 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1763 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1764 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1765 appearing multiple times.
1766
1767 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1768 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1769 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1770 runtime linker would do.
1771
1772 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1773 libraries:
1774 @enumerate
1775 @item
1776 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1777 @item
1778 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1779 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1780 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1781 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1782 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1783 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1784 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1785 @item
1786 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1787 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1788 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1789 @item
1790 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1791 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1792 @item
1793 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1794 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1795 @item
1796 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1797 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1798 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1799 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1800 @item
1801 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1802 @item
1803 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1804 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1805 @end enumerate
1806
1807 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1808 warning and continue with the link.
1809 @end ifset
1810
1811 @kindex -shared
1812 @kindex -Bshareable
1813 @item -shared
1814 @itemx -Bshareable
1815 @cindex shared libraries
1816 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1817 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1818 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1819 undefined symbols in the link.
1820
1821 @kindex --sort-common
1822 @item --sort-common
1823 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1824 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1825 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1826 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1827 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1828 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1829 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1830 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1831
1832 @kindex --sort-section=name
1833 @item --sort-section=name
1834 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1835 patterns in the linker script.
1836
1837 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1838 @item --sort-section=alignment
1839 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1840 patterns in the linker script.
1841
1842 @kindex --split-by-file
1843 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1844 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1845 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1846 size of 1 if not given.
1847
1848 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1849 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1850 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1851 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1852 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1853 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1854 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1855 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1856 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1857 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1858 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1859 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1860
1861 @kindex --stats
1862 @item --stats
1863 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1864 as execution time and memory usage.
1865
1866 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1867 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1868 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1869 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1870 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1871
1872 @kindex --traditional-format
1873 @cindex traditional format
1874 @item --traditional-format
1875 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1876 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1877 use the traditional format instead.
1878
1879 @cindex dbx
1880 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1881 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1882 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1883 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1884 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1885 combine duplicate entries.
1886
1887 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1888 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1889 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1890 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1891 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1892 line.
1893 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1894 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1895 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1896 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1897 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1898
1899 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1900 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1901 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1902 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1903 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1904 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1905 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1906 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1907 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1908
1909 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1910 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1911 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1912 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1913 byte of the text segment.
1914
1915 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1916 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1917 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1918 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1919 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1920 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1921
1922 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1923 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1924 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1925 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1926 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1927
1928 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1929 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1930 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1931 values for @samp{method}:
1932
1933 @table @samp
1934 @item ignore-all
1935 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1936
1937 @item report-all
1938 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1939
1940 @item ignore-in-object-files
1941 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1942 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1943
1944 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1945 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1946 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1947 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1948 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1949 command line.
1950 @end table
1951
1952 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1953 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1954
1955 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1956 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1957 can change this to a warning.
1958
1959 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1960 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1961 @item --dll-verbose
1962 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1963 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1964 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1965 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1966 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1967
1968 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1969 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1970 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1971 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1972 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1973 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1974 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1975 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1976 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1977 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1978 @xref{WIN32}.
1979
1980 @kindex --warn-common
1981 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1982 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1983 @item --warn-common
1984 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1985 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1986 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1987 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1988 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1989 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1990
1991 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1992
1993 @table @samp
1994 @item int i = 1;
1995 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1996 file.
1997
1998 @item extern int i;
1999 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2000 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2001 variable somewhere.
2002
2003 @item int i;
2004 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2005 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2006 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2007 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2008 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2009 a definition of the same variable.
2010 @end table
2011
2012 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2013 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2014 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2015 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2016 a common symbol.
2017
2018 @enumerate
2019 @item
2020 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2021 definition for the symbol.
2022 @smallexample
2023 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2024 overridden by definition
2025 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2026 @end smallexample
2027
2028 @item
2029 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2030 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2031 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2032 @smallexample
2033 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2034 overriding common
2035 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2036 @end smallexample
2037
2038 @item
2039 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2040 @smallexample
2041 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2042 of `@var{symbol}'
2043 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2044 @end smallexample
2045
2046 @item
2047 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2048 @smallexample
2049 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2050 overridden by larger common
2051 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2052 @end smallexample
2053
2054 @item
2055 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2056 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2057 encountered in a different order.
2058 @smallexample
2059 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2060 overriding smaller common
2061 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2062 @end smallexample
2063 @end enumerate
2064
2065 @kindex --warn-constructors
2066 @item --warn-constructors
2067 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2068 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2069 detect the use of global constructors.
2070
2071 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2072 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2073 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2074 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2075 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2076 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2077 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2078 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2079 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2080 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2081 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2082 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2083 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2084
2085 @kindex --warn-once
2086 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2087 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2088 @item --warn-once
2089 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2090 which refers to it.
2091
2092 @kindex --warn-orphan
2093 @kindex --no-warn-orphan
2094 @cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2095 @cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2096 @item --warn-orphan
2097 The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2098 warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
2099 output file. @xref{Orphan Sections}. The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
2100 option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2101 sections.
2102
2103 @kindex --warn-section-align
2104 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2105 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2106 @item --warn-section-align
2107 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2108 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2109 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2110 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2111 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2112
2113 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2114 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2115 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2116
2117 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2118 @item --warn-alternate-em
2119 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2120
2121 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2122 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2123 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2124 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2125 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2126
2127 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2128 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2129 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2130 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2131
2132 @kindex --whole-archive
2133 @cindex including an entire archive
2134 @item --whole-archive
2135 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2136 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2137 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2138 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2139 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2140 library. This option may be used more than once.
2141
2142 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2143 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2144 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2145 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2146 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2147
2148 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2149 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2150 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2151 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2152 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2153 @var{symbol}.
2154
2155 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2156 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2157 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2158 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2159
2160 Here is a trivial example:
2161
2162 @smallexample
2163 void *
2164 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2165 @{
2166 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2167 return __real_malloc (c);
2168 @}
2169 @end smallexample
2170
2171 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2172 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2173 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2174 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2175
2176 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2177 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2178 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2179 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2180 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2181
2182 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2183 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2184 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2185 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2186
2187 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2188 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2189 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2190 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2191 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2192
2193 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2194 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2195 @item --enable-new-dtags
2196 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2197 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2198 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2199 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2200 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2201 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2202 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2203 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2204
2205 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2206 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2207 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2208 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2209 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2210 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2211 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2212
2213 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2214 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2215 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2216 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2217 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2218 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2219 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2220
2221 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2222 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2223 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2224 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2225 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2226 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2227 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2228 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2229 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2230 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2231 compress DWARF debug sections.
2232 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2233 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2234 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2235 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2236 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2237
2238 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2239 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2240 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2241 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2242 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2243 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2244
2245 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2246 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2247 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2248 has been used.
2249
2250 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2251 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2252
2253 @kindex --build-id
2254 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2255 @item --build-id
2256 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2257 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2258 or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2259 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2260 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2261 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2262 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2263 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2264 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2265 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2266 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2267
2268 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2269 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2270 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2271 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2272 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2273 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2274
2275 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2276 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2277 @end table
2278
2279 @c man end
2280
2281 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2282
2283 @c man begin OPTIONS
2284
2285 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2286 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2287 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2288 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2289 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2290 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2291 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2292 object file).
2293
2294 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2295 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2296 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2297 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2298
2299 @table @gcctabopt
2300
2301 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2302 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2303 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2304 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2305 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2306
2307 @kindex --base-file
2308 @item --base-file @var{file}
2309 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2310 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2311 @file{dlltool}.
2312 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2313
2314 @kindex --dll
2315 @item --dll
2316 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2317 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2318 file.
2319 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2320
2321 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2322 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2323 @item --enable-long-section-names
2324 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2325 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2326 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2327 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2328 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2329 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2330 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2331 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2332 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2333 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2334 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2335 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2336 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2337 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2338 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2339 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2340 image and not stripping symbols.
2341 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2342
2343 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2344 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2345 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2346 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2347 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2348 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2349 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2350 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2351 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2352 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2353 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2354 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2355 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2356 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2357 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2358 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2359 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2360 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2361
2362 @kindex --leading-underscore
2363 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2364 @item --leading-underscore
2365 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2366 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2367 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2368 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2369
2370 @cindex DLLs, creating
2371 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2372 @item --export-all-symbols
2373 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2374 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2375 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2376 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2377 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2378 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2379 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2380 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2381 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2382 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2383 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2384 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2385 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2386 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2387 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2388 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2389 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2390 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2391 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2392 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2393 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2394 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2395 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2396
2397 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2398 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2399 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2400 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2401 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2402
2403 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2404 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2405 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2406 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2407
2408 @kindex --file-alignment
2409 @item --file-alignment
2410 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2411 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2412 512.
2413 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2414
2415 @cindex heap size
2416 @kindex --heap
2417 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2418 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2419 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2420 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2421 committed.
2422 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2423
2424 @cindex image base
2425 @kindex --image-base
2426 @item --image-base @var{value}
2427 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2428 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2429 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2430 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2431 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2432 for dlls.
2433 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2434
2435 @kindex --kill-at
2436 @item --kill-at
2437 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2438 symbols before they are exported.
2439 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2440
2441 @kindex --large-address-aware
2442 @item --large-address-aware
2443 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2444 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2445 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2446 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2447 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2448 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2449
2450 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2451 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2452 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2453 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2454 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2455 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2456 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2457
2458 @kindex --major-image-version
2459 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2460 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2461 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2462
2463 @kindex --major-os-version
2464 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2465 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2466 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2467
2468 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2469 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2470 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2471 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2472
2473 @kindex --minor-image-version
2474 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2475 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2476 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2477
2478 @kindex --minor-os-version
2479 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2480 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2481 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2482
2483 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2484 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2485 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2486 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2487
2488 @cindex DEF files, creating
2489 @cindex DLLs, creating
2490 @kindex --output-def
2491 @item --output-def @var{file}
2492 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2493 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2494 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2495 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2496 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2497 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2498
2499 @cindex DLLs, creating
2500 @kindex --out-implib
2501 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2502 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2503 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2504 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2505 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2506 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2507 creation step.
2508 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2509
2510 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2511 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2512 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2513 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2514 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2515 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2516 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2517 execution are avoided.
2518 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2519
2520 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2521 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2522 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2523 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2524 default.
2525 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2526
2527 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2528 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2529 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2530 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2531 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2532 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2533 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2534 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2535 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2536 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2537
2538 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2539 @item --enable-auto-import
2540 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2541 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2542 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2543 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2544 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2545 specification published by Microsoft.
2546
2547 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2548 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2549 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2550 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2551 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2552
2553 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2554 see this message:
2555
2556 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2557 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2558
2559 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2560 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2561 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2562 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2563 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2564 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2565 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2566 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2567 the warning, and exit.
2568
2569 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2570 data type of the exported variable:
2571
2572 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2573 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2574 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2575
2576 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2577 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2578 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2579 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2580
2581 @example
2582 extern type extern_array[];
2583 extern_array[1] -->
2584 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2585 @end example
2586
2587 or
2588
2589 @example
2590 extern type extern_array[];
2591 extern_array[1] -->
2592 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2593 @end example
2594
2595 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2596 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2597
2598 @example
2599 extern struct s extern_struct;
2600 extern_struct.field -->
2601 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2602 @end example
2603
2604 or
2605
2606 @example
2607 extern long long extern_ll;
2608 extern_ll -->
2609 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2610 @end example
2611
2612 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2613 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2614 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2615 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2616 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2617 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2618 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2619 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2620
2621 Original:
2622 @example
2623 --foo.h
2624 extern int arr[];
2625 --foo.c
2626 #include "foo.h"
2627 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2628 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2629 @}
2630 @end example
2631
2632 Solution 1:
2633 @example
2634 --foo.h
2635 extern int arr[];
2636 --foo.c
2637 #include "foo.h"
2638 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2639 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2640 volatile int *parr = arr;
2641 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2642 @}
2643 @end example
2644
2645 Solution 2:
2646 @example
2647 --foo.h
2648 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2649 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2650 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2651 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2652 #else
2653 #define FOO_IMPORT
2654 #endif
2655 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2656 --foo.c
2657 #include "foo.h"
2658 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2659 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2660 @}
2661 @end example
2662
2663 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2664 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2665 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2666 functions).
2667 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2668
2669 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2670 @item --disable-auto-import
2671 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2672 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2673 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2674
2675 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2676 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2677 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2678 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2679 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2680 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2681 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2682
2683 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2684 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2685 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2686 DLLs.
2687 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2688
2689 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2690 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2691 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2692 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2693
2694 @kindex --section-alignment
2695 @item --section-alignment
2696 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2697 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2698 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2699
2700 @cindex stack size
2701 @kindex --stack
2702 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2703 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2704 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2705 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2706 committed.
2707 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2708
2709 @kindex --subsystem
2710 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2711 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2712 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2713 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2714 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2715 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2716 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2717 @var{which}.
2718 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2719
2720 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2721 of the PE file header:
2722 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2723
2724 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2725 @item --high-entropy-va
2726 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2727 (ASLR).
2728
2729 @kindex --dynamicbase
2730 @item --dynamicbase
2731 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2732 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2733 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2734
2735 @kindex --forceinteg
2736 @item --forceinteg
2737 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2738
2739 @kindex --nxcompat
2740 @item --nxcompat
2741 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2742 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2743
2744 @kindex --no-isolation
2745 @item --no-isolation
2746 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2747
2748 @kindex --no-seh
2749 @item --no-seh
2750 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2751 this image.
2752
2753 @kindex --no-bind
2754 @item --no-bind
2755 Do not bind this image.
2756
2757 @kindex --wdmdriver
2758 @item --wdmdriver
2759 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2760
2761 @kindex --tsaware
2762 @item --tsaware
2763 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2764
2765 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2766 @item --insert-timestamp
2767 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2768 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2769 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2770 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2771 will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2772 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2773 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2774 that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2775 identically.
2776 @end table
2777
2778 @c man end
2779
2780 @ifset C6X
2781 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2782
2783 @c man begin OPTIONS
2784
2785 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2786 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2787 all executables use an index of 0.
2788
2789 @table @gcctabopt
2790
2791 @kindex --dsbt-size
2792 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2793 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2794 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2795 entries.
2796
2797 @kindex --dsbt-index
2798 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2799 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2800 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2801 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2802 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2803
2804 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2805 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2806 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2807
2808 @end table
2809
2810 @c man end
2811 @end ifset
2812
2813 @ifset M68HC11
2814 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2815
2816 @c man begin OPTIONS
2817
2818 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2819 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2820
2821 @table @gcctabopt
2822
2823 @kindex --no-trampoline
2824 @item --no-trampoline
2825 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2826 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2827 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2828
2829 @kindex --bank-window
2830 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2831 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2832 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2833 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2834 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2835
2836 @end table
2837
2838 @c man end
2839 @end ifset
2840
2841 @ifset M68K
2842 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2843
2844 @c man begin OPTIONS
2845
2846 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2847 when linking for 68K targets.
2848
2849 @table @gcctabopt
2850
2851 @kindex --got
2852 @item --got=@var{type}
2853 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2854 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2855 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2856 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2857
2858 @end table
2859
2860 @c man end
2861 @end ifset
2862
2863 @ifset MIPS
2864 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2865
2866 @c man begin OPTIONS
2867
2868 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2869 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2870
2871 @table @gcctabopt
2872
2873 @kindex --insn32
2874 @item --insn32
2875 @kindex --no-insn32
2876 @itemx --no-insn32
2877 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2878 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2879 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2880 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2881 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2882 possible.
2883
2884 @end table
2885
2886 @c man end
2887 @end ifset
2888
2889 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2890 @node Environment
2891 @section Environment Variables
2892
2893 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2894
2895 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2896 @ifclear SingleFormat
2897 @code{GNUTARGET},
2898 @end ifclear
2899 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2900
2901 @ifclear SingleFormat
2902 @kindex GNUTARGET
2903 @cindex default input format
2904 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2905 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2906 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2907 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2908 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2909 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2910 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2911 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2912 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2913 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2914 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2915 @end ifclear
2916
2917 @kindex LDEMULATION
2918 @cindex default emulation
2919 @cindex emulation, default
2920 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2921 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2922 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2923 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2924 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2925 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2926 linker was configured.
2927
2928 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2929 @cindex demangling, default
2930 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2931 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2932 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2933 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2934 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2935 options.
2936
2937 @c man end
2938 @end ifset
2939
2940 @node Scripts
2941 @chapter Linker Scripts
2942
2943 @cindex scripts
2944 @cindex linker scripts
2945 @cindex command files
2946 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2947 written in the linker command language.
2948
2949 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2950 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2951 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2952 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2953 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2954 described below.
2955
2956 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2957 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2958 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2959 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2960 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2961
2962 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2963 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2964 default linker script.
2965
2966 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2967 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2968 Linker Scripts}.
2969
2970 @menu
2971 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2972 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2973 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2974 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2975 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2976 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2977 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2978 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2979 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2980 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2981 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2982 @end menu
2983
2984 @node Basic Script Concepts
2985 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2986 @cindex linker script concepts
2987 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2988 describe the linker script language.
2989
2990 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2991 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2992 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2993 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2994 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2995 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2996 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2997 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2998
2999 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3000 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3001 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3002 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3003 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3004 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3005 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3006 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3007 of debugging information.
3008
3009 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3010 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3011 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3012 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3013 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3014 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3015 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3016 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3017 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3018 RAM address would be the VMA.
3019
3020 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3021 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3022
3023 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3024 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3025 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3026 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3027 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3028 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3029 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3030
3031 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3032 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3033 option.
3034
3035 @node Script Format
3036 @section Linker Script Format
3037 @cindex linker script format
3038 Linker scripts are text files.
3039
3040 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3041 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3042 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3043 generally ignored.
3044
3045 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3046 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3047 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3048 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3049 file name.
3050
3051 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3052 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3053 to whitespace.
3054
3055 @node Simple Example
3056 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3057 @cindex linker script example
3058 @cindex example of linker script
3059 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3060
3061 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3062 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3063 memory layout of the output file.
3064
3065 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3066 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3067 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3068 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3069 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3070 your input files.
3071
3072 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3073 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3074 linker script which will do that:
3075 @smallexample
3076 SECTIONS
3077 @{
3078 . = 0x10000;
3079 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3080 . = 0x8000000;
3081 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3082 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3083 @}
3084 @end smallexample
3085
3086 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3087 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3088 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3089
3090 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3091 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3092 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3093 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3094 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3095 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3096 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3097
3098 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3099 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3100 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3101 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3102 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3103 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3104
3105 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3106 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3107 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3108
3109 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3110 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3111 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3112 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3113 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3114 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3115 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3116
3117 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3118 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3119 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3120 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3121 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3122 sections.
3123
3124 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3125
3126 @node Simple Commands
3127 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3128 @cindex linker script simple commands
3129 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3130
3131 @menu
3132 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3133 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3134 @ifclear SingleFormat
3135 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3136 @end ifclear
3137
3138 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3139 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3140 @end menu
3141
3142 @node Entry Point
3143 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3144 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3145 @cindex start of execution
3146 @cindex first instruction
3147 @cindex entry point
3148 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3149 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3150 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3151 @smallexample
3152 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3153 @end smallexample
3154
3155 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3156 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3157 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3158 @itemize @bullet
3159 @item
3160 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3161 @item
3162 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3163 @item
3164 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3165 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3166 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3167 @item
3168 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3169 @item
3170 The address @code{0}.
3171 @end itemize
3172
3173 @node File Commands
3174 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3175 @cindex linker script file commands
3176 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3177
3178 @table @code
3179 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3180 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3181 @cindex including a linker script
3182 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3183 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3184 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3185 10 levels deep.
3186
3187 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3188 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3189
3190 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3191 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3192 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3193 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3194 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3195 @cindex linker script input object files
3196 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3197 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3198
3199 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3200 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3201 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3202
3203 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3204 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3205
3206 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3207 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3208 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3209 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3210 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3211 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3212 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3213 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3214 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3215
3216 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3217 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3218 @samp{-l}.
3219
3220 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3221 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3222 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3223
3224 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3225 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3226 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3227 @cindex grouping input files
3228 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3229 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3230 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3231 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3232
3233 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3234 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3235 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3236 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3237 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3238 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3239 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3240 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3241 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3242 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3243 setting afterwards.
3244
3245 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3246 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3247 @cindex output file name in linker script
3248 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3249 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3250 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3251 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3252 precedence.
3253
3254 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3255 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3256
3257 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3258 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3259 @cindex library search path in linker script
3260 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3261 @cindex search path in linker script
3262 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3263 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3264 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3265 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3266 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3267 the command line option are searched first.
3268
3269 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3270 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3271 @cindex first input file
3272 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3273 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3274 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3275 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3276 first file.
3277 @end table
3278
3279 @ifclear SingleFormat
3280 @node Format Commands
3281 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3282 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3283
3284 @table @code
3285 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3286 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3287 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3288 @cindex output file format in linker script
3289 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3290 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3291 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3292 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3293 line option takes precedence.
3294
3295 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3296 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3297 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3298 desired endianness.
3299
3300 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3301 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3302 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3303 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3304
3305 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3306 command:
3307 @smallexample
3308 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3309 @end smallexample
3310 This says that the default format for the output file is
3311 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3312 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3313 format.
3314
3315 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3316 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3317 @cindex input file format in linker script
3318 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3319 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3320 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3321 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3322 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3323 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3324 @end table
3325 @end ifclear
3326
3327 @node REGION_ALIAS
3328 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3329 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3330 @cindex region alias
3331 @cindex region names
3332
3333 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3334 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3335
3336 @smallexample
3337 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3338 @end smallexample
3339
3340 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3341 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3342 to memory regions. An example follows.
3343
3344 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3345 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3346 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3347 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3348 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3349 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3350 sections:
3351
3352 @itemize @bullet
3353 @item
3354 @code{.text} program code;
3355 @item
3356 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3357 @item
3358 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3359 @item
3360 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3361 @end itemize
3362
3363 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3364 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3365 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3366 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3367 @code{C}:
3368 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3369 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3370 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3371 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3372 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3373 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3374 @end multitable
3375 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3376 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3377 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3378 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3379
3380 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3381 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3382 memory layout:
3383 @smallexample
3384 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3385
3386 SECTIONS
3387 @{
3388 .text :
3389 @{
3390 *(.text)
3391 @} > REGION_TEXT
3392 .rodata :
3393 @{
3394 *(.rodata)
3395 rodata_end = .;
3396 @} > REGION_RODATA
3397 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3398 @{
3399 data_start = .;
3400 *(.data)
3401 @} > REGION_DATA
3402 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3403 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3404 .bss :
3405 @{
3406 *(.bss)
3407 @} > REGION_BSS
3408 @}
3409 @end smallexample
3410
3411 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3412 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3413 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3414 @table @code
3415 @item A
3416 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3417 @smallexample
3418 MEMORY
3419 @{
3420 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3421 @}
3422
3423 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3424 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3425 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3426 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3427 @end smallexample
3428 @item B
3429 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3430 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3431 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3432 @smallexample
3433 MEMORY
3434 @{
3435 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3436 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3437 @}
3438
3439 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3440 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3441 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3442 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3443 @end smallexample
3444 @item C
3445 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3446 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3447 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3448 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3449 @smallexample
3450 MEMORY
3451 @{
3452 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3453 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3454 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3455 @}
3456
3457 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3458 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3459 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3460 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3461 @end smallexample
3462 @end table
3463
3464 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3465 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3466 necessary:
3467 @smallexample
3468 #include <string.h>
3469
3470 extern char data_start [];
3471 extern char data_size [];
3472 extern char data_load_start [];
3473
3474 void copy_data(void)
3475 @{
3476 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3477 @{
3478 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3479 @}
3480 @}
3481 @end smallexample
3482
3483 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3484 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3485 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3486
3487 @table @code
3488 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3489 @kindex ASSERT
3490 @cindex assertion in linker script
3491 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3492 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3493
3494 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3495 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3496 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3497 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3498 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3499
3500 @smallexample
3501 .stack :
3502 @{
3503 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3504 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3505 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3506 @}
3507 @end smallexample
3508
3509 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3510 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3511 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3512
3513 @smallexample
3514 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3515 .stack :
3516 @{
3517 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3518 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3519 @}
3520 @end smallexample
3521
3522 will work.
3523
3524 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3525 @kindex EXTERN
3526 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3527 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3528 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3529 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3530 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3531 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3532
3533 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3534 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3535 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3536 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3537 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3538 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3539
3540 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3541 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3542 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3543 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3544 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3545 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3546
3547 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3548 @kindex INSERT
3549 @cindex insert user script into default script
3550 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3551 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3552 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3553 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3554 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3555 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3556 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3557 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3558 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3559 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3560 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3561 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3562 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3563
3564 @smallexample
3565 SECTIONS
3566 @{
3567 OVERLAY :
3568 @{
3569 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3570 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3571 @}
3572 @}
3573 INSERT AFTER .text;
3574 @end smallexample
3575
3576 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3577 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3578 @cindex cross references
3579 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3580 references among certain output sections.
3581
3582 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3583 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3584 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3585 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3586 a function defined in the other section.
3587
3588 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3589 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3590 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3591 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3592 names.
3593
3594 @ifclear SingleFormat
3595 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3596 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3597 @cindex machine architecture
3598 @cindex architecture
3599 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3600 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3601 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3602 the @samp{-f} option.
3603 @end ifclear
3604
3605 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3606 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3607 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3608 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3609 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3610 @xref{Expression Section}.
3611 @end table
3612
3613 @node Assignments
3614 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3615 @cindex assignment in scripts
3616 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3617 @cindex variables, defining
3618 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3619 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3620
3621 @menu
3622 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3623 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3624 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3625 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3626 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3627 @end menu
3628
3629 @node Simple Assignments
3630 @subsection Simple Assignments
3631
3632 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3633
3634 @table @code
3635 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3636 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3637 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3638 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3639 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3640 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3641 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3642 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3643 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3644 @end table
3645
3646 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3647 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3648 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3649
3650 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3651 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3652
3653 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3654
3655 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3656
3657 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3658 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3659 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3660
3661 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3662 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3663
3664 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3665 assignments may be used:
3666
3667 @smallexample
3668 floating_point = 0;
3669 SECTIONS
3670 @{
3671 .text :
3672 @{
3673 *(.text)
3674 _etext = .;
3675 @}
3676 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3677 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3678 @}
3679 @end smallexample
3680 @noindent
3681 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3682 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3683 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3684 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3685 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3686
3687 @node HIDDEN
3688 @subsection HIDDEN
3689 @cindex HIDDEN
3690 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3691 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3692
3693 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3694 @code{HIDDEN}:
3695
3696 @smallexample
3697 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3698 SECTIONS
3699 @{
3700 .text :
3701 @{
3702 *(.text)
3703 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3704 @}
3705 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3706 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3707 @}
3708 @end smallexample
3709 @noindent
3710 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3711
3712 @node PROVIDE
3713 @subsection PROVIDE
3714 @cindex PROVIDE
3715 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3716 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3717 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3718 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3719 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3720 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3721 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3722 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3723
3724 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3725 @smallexample
3726 SECTIONS
3727 @{
3728 .text :
3729 @{
3730 *(.text)
3731 _etext = .;
3732 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3733 @}
3734 @}
3735 @end smallexample
3736
3737 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3738 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3739 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3740 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3741 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3742 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3743
3744 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3745 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3746 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3747 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3748 hidden and won't be exported.
3749
3750 @node Source Code Reference
3751 @subsection Source Code Reference
3752
3753 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3754 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3755 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3756 symbol that does not have a value.
3757
3758 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3759 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3760 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3761 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3762 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3763 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3764 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3765 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3766
3767 @smallexample
3768 extern int foo;
3769 @end smallexample
3770
3771 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3772
3773 @smallexample
3774 _foo = 1000;
3775 @end smallexample
3776
3777 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3778 transformation has taken place.
3779
3780 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3781 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3782 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3783 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3784 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3785 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3786 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3787
3788 @smallexample
3789 int foo = 1000;
3790 @end smallexample
3791
3792 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3793 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3794 number 1000 is initially stored.
3795
3796 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3797 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3798 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3799 So:
3800
3801 @smallexample
3802 foo = 1;
3803 @end smallexample
3804
3805 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3806 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3807 address. Whereas:
3808
3809 @smallexample
3810 int * a = & foo;
3811 @end smallexample
3812
3813 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3814 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3815 the variable @samp{a}.
3816
3817 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3818 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3819 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3820
3821 @smallexample
3822 foo = 1000;
3823 @end smallexample
3824
3825 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3826 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3827 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3828 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3829 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3830
3831 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3832 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3833 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3834 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3835 linker script contains these declarations:
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 @group
3839 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3840 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3841 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3842 @end group
3843 @end smallexample
3844
3845 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3846
3847 @smallexample
3848 @group
3849 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3850
3851 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3852 @end group
3853 @end smallexample
3854
3855 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3856
3857 @node SECTIONS
3858 @section SECTIONS Command
3859 @kindex SECTIONS
3860 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3861 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3862
3863 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3864 @smallexample
3865 SECTIONS
3866 @{
3867 @var{sections-command}
3868 @var{sections-command}
3869 @dots{}
3870 @}
3871 @end smallexample
3872
3873 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3874
3875 @itemize @bullet
3876 @item
3877 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3878 @item
3879 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3880 @item
3881 an output section description
3882 @item
3883 an overlay description
3884 @end itemize
3885
3886 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3887 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3888 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3889 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3890 the layout of the output file.
3891
3892 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3893 below.
3894
3895 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3896 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3897 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3898 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3899 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3900 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3901
3902 @menu
3903 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3904 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3905 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3906 * Input Section:: Input section description
3907 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3908 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3909 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3910 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3911 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3912 @end menu
3913
3914 @node Output Section Description
3915 @subsection Output Section Description
3916 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3917 @smallexample
3918 @group
3919 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3920 [AT(@var{lma})]
3921 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3922 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3923 [@var{constraint}]
3924 @{
3925 @var{output-section-command}
3926 @var{output-section-command}
3927 @dots{}
3928 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3929 @end group
3930 @end smallexample
3931
3932 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3933
3934 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3935 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3936 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3937 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3938 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3939
3940 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3941
3942 @itemize @bullet
3943 @item
3944 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3945 @item
3946 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3947 @item
3948 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3949 @item
3950 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3951 @end itemize
3952
3953 @node Output Section Name
3954 @subsection Output Section Name
3955 @cindex name, section
3956 @cindex section name
3957 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3958 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3959 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3960 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3961 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3962 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3963 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3964 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3965 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3966 commas must be quoted.
3967
3968 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3969 Discarding}.
3970
3971 @node Output Section Address
3972 @subsection Output Section Address
3973 @cindex address, section
3974 @cindex section address
3975 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3976 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3977 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3978
3979 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3980 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3981 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3982 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3983 contained within the output section.
3984
3985 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3986
3987 @itemize @bullet
3988 @item
3989 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3990 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3991 in that region.
3992
3993 @item
3994 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3995 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3996 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3997 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3998
3999 @item
4000 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4001 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4002 counter.
4003 @end itemize
4004
4005 @noindent
4006 For example:
4007
4008 @smallexample
4009 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4010 @end smallexample
4011
4012 @noindent
4013 and
4014
4015 @smallexample
4016 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4017 @end smallexample
4018
4019 @noindent
4020 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4021 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4022 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4023 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4024 input sections.
4025
4026 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4027 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4028 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4029 do something like this:
4030 @smallexample
4031 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4032 @end smallexample
4033 @noindent
4034 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4035 aligned upward to the specified value.
4036
4037 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4038 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4039 sections are ignored).
4040
4041 @node Input Section
4042 @subsection Input Section Description
4043 @cindex input sections
4044 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4045 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4046
4047 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4048 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4049 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4050 map the input files into your memory layout.
4051
4052 @menu
4053 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4054 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4055 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4056 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4057 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4058 @end menu
4059
4060 @node Input Section Basics
4061 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4062 @cindex input section basics
4063 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4064 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4065
4066 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4067 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4068
4069 The most common input section description is to include all input
4070 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4071 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4072 @smallexample
4073 *(.text)
4074 @end smallexample
4075 @noindent
4076 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4077 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4078 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4079 example:
4080 @smallexample
4081 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4082 @end smallexample
4083 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4084 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4085
4086 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4087 @smallexample
4088 *(.text .rdata)
4089 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4090 @end smallexample
4091 @noindent
4092 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4093 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4094 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4095 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4096 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4097 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4098
4099 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4100 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4101 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4102 @smallexample
4103 data.o(.data)
4104 @end smallexample
4105
4106 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4107 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4108
4109 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4110
4111 @smallexample
4112 @group
4113 SECTIONS @{
4114 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4115 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4116 @}
4117 @end group
4118 @end smallexample
4119
4120 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4121 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4122 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4123 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4124 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4125
4126 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4127 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4128 with no whitespace around the colon.
4129
4130 @table @samp
4131 @item archive:file
4132 matches file within archive
4133 @item archive:
4134 matches the whole archive
4135 @item :file
4136 matches file but not one in an archive
4137 @end table
4138
4139 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4140 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4141 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4142 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4143 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4144 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4145 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4146 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4147 command.
4148
4149 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4150 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4151 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4152 @smallexample
4153 data.o
4154 @end smallexample
4155
4156 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4157 and does not contain any wild card
4158 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4159 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4160 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4161 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4162 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4163 the archive search path.
4164
4165 @node Input Section Wildcards
4166 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4167 @cindex input section wildcards
4168 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4169 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4170 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4171 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4172 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4173
4174 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4175 pattern for the file name.
4176
4177 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4178
4179 @table @samp
4180 @item *
4181 matches any number of characters
4182 @item ?
4183 matches any single character
4184 @item [@var{chars}]
4185 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4186 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4187 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4188 @item \
4189 quotes the following character
4190 @end table
4191
4192 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4193 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4194 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4195 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4196 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4197 a @samp{/} character.
4198
4199 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4200 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4201 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4202
4203 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4204 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4205 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4206 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4207 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4208 @smallexample
4209 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4210 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4211 @end smallexample
4212
4213 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4214 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4215 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4216 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4217 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4218 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4219 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4220
4221 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4222 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4223 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4224 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4225 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4226 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4227
4228 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4229 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4230 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4231 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4232 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4233
4234 @cindex SORT
4235 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4236
4237 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4238 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4239
4240 @enumerate
4241 @item
4242 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4243 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4244 sections have the same name.
4245 @item
4246 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4247 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4248 sections have the same alignment.
4249 @item
4250 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4251 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4252 @item
4253 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4254 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4255 @item
4256 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4257 @end enumerate
4258
4259 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4260 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4261 takes precedence over the command line option.
4262
4263 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4264 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4265 treated as nested sorting command.
4266
4267 @enumerate
4268 @item
4269 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4270 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4271 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4272 @item
4273 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4274 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4275 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4276 @end enumerate
4277
4278 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4279 command line option will be ignored.
4280
4281 @cindex SORT_NONE
4282 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4283 section sorting option.
4284
4285 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4286 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4287 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4288
4289 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4290 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4291 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4292 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4293 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4294 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4295 @smallexample
4296 @group
4297 SECTIONS @{
4298 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4299 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4300 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4301 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4302 @}
4303 @end group
4304 @end smallexample
4305
4306 @node Input Section Common
4307 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4308 @cindex common symbol placement
4309 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4310 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4311 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4312 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4313 named @samp{COMMON}.
4314
4315 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4316 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4317 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4318 input files are placed in another section.
4319
4320 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4321 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4322 @smallexample
4323 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4324 @end smallexample
4325
4326 @cindex scommon section
4327 @cindex small common symbols
4328 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4329 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4330 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4331 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4332 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4333 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4334 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4335 locations.
4336
4337 @cindex [COMMON]
4338 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4339 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4340 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4341
4342 @node Input Section Keep
4343 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4344 @cindex KEEP
4345 @cindex garbage collection
4346 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4347 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4348 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4349 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4350 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4351
4352 @node Input Section Example
4353 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4354 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4355 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4356 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4357 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4358 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4359 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4360 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4361 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4362 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4363
4364 @smallexample
4365 @group
4366 SECTIONS @{
4367 outputa 0x10000 :
4368 @{
4369 all.o
4370 foo.o (.input1)
4371 @}
4372 @end group
4373 @group
4374 outputb :
4375 @{
4376 foo.o (.input2)
4377 foo1.o (.input1)
4378 @}
4379 @end group
4380 @group
4381 outputc :
4382 @{
4383 *(.input1)
4384 *(.input2)
4385 @}
4386 @}
4387 @end group
4388 @end smallexample
4389
4390 @node Output Section Data
4391 @subsection Output Section Data
4392 @cindex data
4393 @cindex section data
4394 @cindex output section data
4395 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4396 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4397 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4398 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4399 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4400 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4401 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4402 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4403 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4404 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4405 counter.
4406
4407 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4408 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4409 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4410 stored.
4411
4412 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4413 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4414 @smallexample
4415 BYTE(1)
4416 LONG(addr)
4417 @end smallexample
4418
4419 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4420 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4421 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4422 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4423 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4424
4425 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4426 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4427 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4428 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4429 endianness of the first input object file.
4430
4431 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4432 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4433 @smallexample
4434 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4435 @end smallexample
4436 whereas this will work:
4437 @smallexample
4438 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4439 @end smallexample
4440
4441 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4442 @cindex holes, filling
4443 @cindex unspecified memory
4444 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4445 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4446 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4447 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4448 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4449 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4450 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4451 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4452 different parts of an output section.
4453
4454 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4455 value @samp{0x90}:
4456 @smallexample
4457 FILL(0x90909090)
4458 @end smallexample
4459
4460 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4461 section attribute, but it only affects the
4462 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4463 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4464 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4465 expression.
4466
4467 @node Output Section Keywords
4468 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4469 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4470 commands.
4471
4472 @table @code
4473 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4474 @cindex input filename symbols
4475 @cindex filename symbols
4476 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4477 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4478 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4479 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4480 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4481
4482 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4483 normally used for any other object file format.
4484
4485 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4486 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4487 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4488 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4489 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4490 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4491 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4492 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4493 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4494 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4495 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4496 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4497 ignored for other object file formats.
4498
4499 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4500 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4501 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4502 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4503 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4504 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4505 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4506 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4507 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4508 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4509 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4510 @code{exit}.
4511
4512 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4513 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4514 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4515 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4516 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4517 runtime code expects to see.
4518
4519 @smallexample
4520 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4521 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4522 *(.ctors)
4523 LONG(0)
4524 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4525 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4526 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4527 *(.dtors)
4528 LONG(0)
4529 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4530 @end smallexample
4531
4532 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4533 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4534 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4535 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4536 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4537 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4538 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4539 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4540
4541 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4542 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4543 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4544 scripts.
4545
4546 @end table
4547
4548 @node Output Section Discarding
4549 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4550 @cindex discarding sections
4551 @cindex sections, discarding
4552 @cindex removing sections
4553 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4554 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4555 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4556 @smallexample
4557 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4558 @end smallexample
4559 @noindent
4560 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4561 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4562 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4563 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4564 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4565 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4566 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4567 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4568 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4569
4570 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4571 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4572 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4573 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4574 section is discarded.
4575
4576 @cindex /DISCARD/
4577 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4578 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4579 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4580
4581 @node Output Section Attributes
4582 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4583 @cindex output section attributes
4584 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4585 like this:
4586
4587 @smallexample
4588 @group
4589 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4590 [AT(@var{lma})]
4591 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4592 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4593 [@var{constraint}]
4594 @{
4595 @var{output-section-command}
4596 @var{output-section-command}
4597 @dots{}
4598 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4599 @end group
4600 @end smallexample
4601
4602 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4603 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4604 remaining section attributes.
4605
4606 @menu
4607 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4608 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4609 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4610 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4611 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4612 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4613 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4614 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4615 @end menu
4616
4617 @node Output Section Type
4618 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4619 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4620 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4621
4622 @table @code
4623 @item NOLOAD
4624 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4625 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4626 @item DSECT
4627 @itemx COPY
4628 @itemx INFO
4629 @itemx OVERLAY
4630 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4631 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4632 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4633 section when the program is run.
4634 @end table
4635
4636 @kindex NOLOAD
4637 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4638 @cindex loading, preventing
4639 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4640 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4641 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4642 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4643 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4644 @smallexample
4645 @group
4646 SECTIONS @{
4647 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4648 @dots{}
4649 @}
4650 @end group
4651 @end smallexample
4652
4653 @node Output Section LMA
4654 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4655 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4656 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4657 @cindex load address
4658 @cindex section load address
4659 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4660 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4661 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4662 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4663 address is optional.
4664
4665 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4666 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4667 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4668 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4669 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4670
4671 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4672 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4673 load address:
4674
4675 @itemize @bullet
4676 @item
4677 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4678 the LMA address as well.
4679
4680 @item
4681 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4682
4683 @item
4684 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4685 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4686 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4687 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4688 the last section in the located region.
4689
4690 @item
4691 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4692 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4693
4694 @item
4695 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4696 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4697 @end itemize
4698
4699 @cindex ROM initialized data
4700 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4701 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4702 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4703 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4704 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4705 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4706 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4707 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4708 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4709
4710 @smallexample
4711 @group
4712 SECTIONS
4713 @{
4714 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4715 .mdata 0x2000 :
4716 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4717 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4718 .bss 0x3000 :
4719 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4720 @}
4721 @end group
4722 @end smallexample
4723
4724 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4725 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4726 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4727 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4728 script.
4729
4730 @smallexample
4731 @group
4732 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4733 char *src = &_etext;
4734 char *dst = &_data;
4735
4736 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4737 while (dst < &_edata)
4738 *dst++ = *src++;
4739
4740 /* Zero bss. */
4741 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4742 *dst = 0;
4743 @end group
4744 @end smallexample
4745
4746 @node Forced Output Alignment
4747 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4748 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4749 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4750 @cindex output section alignment
4751 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4752 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4753 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4754
4755 @node Forced Input Alignment
4756 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4757 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4758 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4759 @cindex input section alignment
4760 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4761 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4762 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4763
4764 @node Output Section Constraint
4765 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4766 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4767 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4768 @cindex constraints on output sections
4769 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4770 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4771 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4772 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4773
4774 @node Output Section Region
4775 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4776 @kindex >@var{region}
4777 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4778 @cindex memory regions and sections
4779 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4780 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4781
4782 Here is a simple example:
4783 @smallexample
4784 @group
4785 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4786 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4787 @end group
4788 @end smallexample
4789
4790 @node Output Section Phdr
4791 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4792 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4793 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4794 @cindex program headers and sections
4795 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4796 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4797 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4798 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4799 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4800 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4801
4802 Here is a simple example:
4803 @smallexample
4804 @group
4805 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4806 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4807 @end group
4808 @end smallexample
4809
4810 @node Output Section Fill
4811 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4812 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4813 @cindex section fill pattern
4814 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4815 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4816 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4817 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4818 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4819 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4820 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4821 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4822 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4823 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4824 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4825 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4826 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4827
4828 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4829 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4830
4831 Here is a simple example:
4832 @smallexample
4833 @group
4834 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4835 @end group
4836 @end smallexample
4837
4838 @node Overlay Description
4839 @subsection Overlay Description
4840 @kindex OVERLAY
4841 @cindex overlays
4842 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4843 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4844 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4845 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4846 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4847 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4848 than another.
4849
4850 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4851 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4852 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4853 command is as follows:
4854 @smallexample
4855 @group
4856 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4857 @{
4858 @var{secname1}
4859 @{
4860 @var{output-section-command}
4861 @var{output-section-command}
4862 @dots{}
4863 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4864 @var{secname2}
4865 @{
4866 @var{output-section-command}
4867 @var{output-section-command}
4868 @dots{}
4869 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4870 @dots{}
4871 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4872 @end group
4873 @end smallexample
4874
4875 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4876 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4877 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4878 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4879 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4880 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4881
4882 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4883 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4884
4885 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4886 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4887 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4888 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4889 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4890 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4891
4892 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4893 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4894 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4895 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4896 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4897
4898 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4899 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4900 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4901 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4902 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4903 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4904 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4905
4906 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4907 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4908
4909 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4910 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4911 @smallexample
4912 @group
4913 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4914 @{
4915 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4916 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4917 @}
4918 @end group
4919 @end smallexample
4920 @noindent
4921 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4922 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4923 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4924 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4925 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4926 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4927
4928 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4929 like the following.
4930
4931 @smallexample
4932 @group
4933 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4934 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4935 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4936 @end group
4937 @end smallexample
4938
4939 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4940 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4941 example could have been written identically as follows.
4942
4943 @smallexample
4944 @group
4945 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4946 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4947 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4948 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4949 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4950 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4951 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4952 @end group
4953 @end smallexample
4954
4955 @node MEMORY
4956 @section MEMORY Command
4957 @kindex MEMORY
4958 @cindex memory regions
4959 @cindex regions of memory
4960 @cindex allocating memory
4961 @cindex discontinuous memory
4962 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4963 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4964
4965 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4966 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4967 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4968 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4969 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4970 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4971 around to fit into the available regions.
4972
4973 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4974 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4975 you wish. The syntax is:
4976 @smallexample
4977 @group
4978 MEMORY
4979 @{
4980 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4981 @dots{}
4982 @}
4983 @end group
4984 @end smallexample
4985
4986 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4987 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4988 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4989 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4990 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4991 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4992 command.
4993
4994 @cindex memory region attributes
4995 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4996 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4997 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4998 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4999 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5000 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5001 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5002
5003 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5004 @table @samp
5005 @item R
5006 Read-only section
5007 @item W
5008 Read/write section
5009 @item X
5010 Executable section
5011 @item A
5012 Allocatable section
5013 @item I
5014 Initialized section
5015 @item L
5016 Same as @samp{I}
5017 @item !
5018 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5019 @end table
5020
5021 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5022 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5023 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5024 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5025 attributes.
5026
5027 @kindex ORIGIN =
5028 @kindex o =
5029 @kindex org =
5030 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5031 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5032 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5033 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5034 @code{ORG}).
5035
5036 @kindex LENGTH =
5037 @kindex len =
5038 @kindex l =
5039 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5040 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5041 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5042 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5043
5044 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5045 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5046 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5047 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5048 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5049 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5050 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5051 region.
5052
5053 @smallexample
5054 @group
5055 MEMORY
5056 @{
5057 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5058 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5059 @}
5060 @end group
5061 @end smallexample
5062
5063 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5064 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5065 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5066 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5067 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5068 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5069 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5070 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5071 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5072
5073 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5074 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5075 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5076
5077 @smallexample
5078 @group
5079 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5080 @end group
5081 @end smallexample
5082
5083 @node PHDRS
5084 @section PHDRS Command
5085 @kindex PHDRS
5086 @cindex program headers
5087 @cindex ELF program headers
5088 @cindex program segments
5089 @cindex segments, ELF
5090 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5091 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5092 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5093 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5094
5095 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5096 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5097 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5098 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5099 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5100
5101 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5102 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5103 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5104 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5105 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5106
5107 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5108 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5109 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5110
5111 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5112 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5113
5114 @smallexample
5115 @group
5116 PHDRS
5117 @{
5118 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5119 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5120 @}
5121 @end group
5122 @end smallexample
5123
5124 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5125 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5126 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5127 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5128 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5129 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5130
5131 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5132 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5133 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5134 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5135 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5136 Section Phdr}.
5137
5138 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5139 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5140 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5141 contain the section.
5142
5143 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5144 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5145 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5146 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5147 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5148 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5149 segment at all.
5150
5151 @kindex FILEHDR
5152 @kindex PHDRS
5153 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5154 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5155 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5156 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5157 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5158 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5159 these keywords.
5160
5161 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5162 value of the keyword.
5163
5164 @table @asis
5165 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5166 Indicates an unused program header.
5167
5168 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5169 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5170 the file.
5171
5172 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5173 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5174
5175 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5176 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5177 found.
5178
5179 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5180 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5181
5182 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5183 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5184 ABI.
5185
5186 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5187 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5188
5189 @item @var{expression}
5190 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5191 be used for types not defined above.
5192 @end table
5193
5194 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5195 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5196 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5197 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5198 output section attribute.
5199
5200 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5201 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5202 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5203 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5204 header.
5205
5206 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5207 headers used on a native ELF system.
5208
5209 @example
5210 @group
5211 PHDRS
5212 @{
5213 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5214 interp PT_INTERP ;
5215 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5216 data PT_LOAD ;
5217 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5218 @}
5219
5220 SECTIONS
5221 @{
5222 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5223 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5224 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5225 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5226 @dots{}
5227 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5228 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5229 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5230 @dots{}
5231 @}
5232 @end group
5233 @end example
5234
5235 @node VERSION
5236 @section VERSION Command
5237 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5238 @cindex symbol versions
5239 @cindex version script
5240 @cindex versions of symbols
5241 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5242 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5243 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5244 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5245 shared library.
5246
5247 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5248 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5249 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5250
5251 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5252 @smallexample
5253 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5254 @end smallexample
5255
5256 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5257 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5258 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5259 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5260 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5261 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5262 library.
5263
5264 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5265 examples.
5266
5267 @smallexample
5268 VERS_1.1 @{
5269 global:
5270 foo1;
5271 local:
5272 old*;
5273 original*;
5274 new*;
5275 @};
5276
5277 VERS_1.2 @{
5278 foo2;
5279 @} VERS_1.1;
5280
5281 VERS_2.0 @{
5282 bar1; bar2;
5283 extern "C++" @{
5284 ns::*;
5285 "f(int, double)";
5286 @};
5287 @} VERS_1.2;
5288 @end smallexample
5289
5290 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5291 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5292 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5293 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5294 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5295 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5296 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5297 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5298 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5299 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5300
5301 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5302 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5303 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5304
5305 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5306 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5307 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5308
5309 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5310 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5311 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5312 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5313 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5314 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5315 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5316 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5317 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5318
5319 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5320 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5321 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5322 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5323
5324 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5325 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5326 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5327 won't.
5328
5329 @smallexample
5330 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5331 @end smallexample
5332
5333 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5334 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5335 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5336 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5337 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5338 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5339 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5340 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5341 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5342 search for each symbol reference.
5343
5344 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5345 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5346 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5347 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5348 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5349 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5350 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5351 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5352 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5353
5354 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5355 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5356 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5357 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5358 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5359 @smallexample
5360 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5361 @end smallexample
5362 @noindent
5363 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5364 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5365 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5366 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5367 takes precedence over a version script.
5368
5369 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5370 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5371 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5372 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5373 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5374
5375 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5376 source file. Here is an example:
5377
5378 @smallexample
5379 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5380 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5381 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5382 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5383 @end smallexample
5384
5385 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5386 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5387 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5388 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5389
5390 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5391 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5392 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5393 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5394 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5395 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5396
5397 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5398 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5399 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5400 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5401
5402 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5403
5404 @smallexample
5405 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5406 @end smallexample
5407
5408 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5409 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5410 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5411 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5412 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5413
5414 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5415 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5416 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5417 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5418 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5419 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5420 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5421 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5422 expect when you upgrade.
5423
5424 @node Expressions
5425 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5426 @cindex expressions
5427 @cindex arithmetic
5428 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5429 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5430 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5431 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5432
5433 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5434
5435 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5436 expressions.
5437
5438 @menu
5439 * Constants:: Constants
5440 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5441 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5442 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5443 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5444 * Operators:: Operators
5445 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5446 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5447 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5448 @end menu
5449
5450 @node Constants
5451 @subsection Constants
5452 @cindex integer notation
5453 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5454 All constants are integers.
5455
5456 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5457 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5458 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5459 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5460 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5461 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5462
5463 @cindex scaled integers
5464 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5465 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5466 @cindex suffixes for integers
5467 @cindex integer suffixes
5468 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5469 constant by
5470 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5471 @ifnottex
5472 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5473 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5474 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5475 @end ifnottex
5476 @tex
5477 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5478 @end tex
5479 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5480 respectively. For example, the following
5481 all refer to the same quantity:
5482
5483 @smallexample
5484 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5485 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5486 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5487 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5488 @end smallexample
5489
5490 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5491 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5492
5493 @node Symbolic Constants
5494 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5495 @cindex symbolic constants
5496 @kindex CONSTANT
5497 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5498 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5499
5500 @table @code
5501 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5502 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5503 The target's maximum page size.
5504
5505 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5506 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5507 The target's default page size.
5508 @end table
5509
5510 So for example:
5511
5512 @smallexample
5513 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5514 @end smallexample
5515
5516 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5517 supported by the target.
5518
5519 @node Symbols
5520 @subsection Symbol Names
5521 @cindex symbol names
5522 @cindex names
5523 @cindex quoted symbol names
5524 @kindex "
5525 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5526 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5527 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5528 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5529 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5530 @smallexample
5531 "SECTION" = 9;
5532 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5533 @end smallexample
5534
5535 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5536 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5537 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5538
5539 @node Orphan Sections
5540 @subsection Orphan Sections
5541 @cindex orphan
5542 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5543 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5544 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5545 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5546 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5547 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5548 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5549 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5550 at the end of the file.
5551
5552 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5553 well as section flag.
5554
5555 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5556 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5557 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5558 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5559 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5560 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5561 character.
5562
5563 @node Location Counter
5564 @subsection The Location Counter
5565 @kindex .
5566 @cindex dot
5567 @cindex location counter
5568 @cindex current output location
5569 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5570 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5571 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5572 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5573 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5574
5575 @cindex holes
5576 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5577 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5578 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5579 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5580 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5581
5582 @smallexample
5583 SECTIONS
5584 @{
5585 output :
5586 @{
5587 file1(.text)
5588 . = . + 1000;
5589 file2(.text)
5590 . += 1000;
5591 file3(.text)
5592 @} = 0x12345678;
5593 @}
5594 @end smallexample
5595 @noindent
5596 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5597 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5598 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5599 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5600 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5601 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5602
5603 @cindex dot inside sections
5604 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5605 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5606 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5607 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5608 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5609 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5610
5611 @smallexample
5612 SECTIONS
5613 @{
5614 . = 0x100
5615 .text: @{
5616 *(.text)
5617 . = 0x200
5618 @}
5619 . = 0x500
5620 .data: @{
5621 *(.data)
5622 . += 0x600
5623 @}
5624 @}
5625 @end smallexample
5626
5627 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5628 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5629 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5630 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5631 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5632 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5633 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5634 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5635
5636 @cindex dot outside sections
5637 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5638 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5639 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5640
5641 @smallexample
5642 SECTIONS
5643 @{
5644 start_of_text = . ;
5645 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5646 end_of_text = . ;
5647
5648 start_of_data = . ;
5649 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5650 end_of_data = . ;
5651 @}
5652 @end smallexample
5653
5654 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5655 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5656 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5657 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5658 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5659 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5660 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5661 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5662 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5663 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5664 as follows:
5665
5666 @smallexample
5667 SECTIONS
5668 @{
5669 start_of_text = . ;
5670 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5671 end_of_text = . ;
5672
5673 start_of_data = . ;
5674 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5675 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5676 end_of_data = . ;
5677 @}
5678 @end smallexample
5679
5680 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5681 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5682 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5683 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5684 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5685 section. So you could write:
5686
5687 @smallexample
5688 SECTIONS
5689 @{
5690 start_of_text = . ;
5691 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5692 end_of_text = . ;
5693
5694 . = . ;
5695 start_of_data = . ;
5696 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5697 end_of_data = . ;
5698 @}
5699 @end smallexample
5700
5701 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5702 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5703
5704 @need 2000
5705 @node Operators
5706 @subsection Operators
5707 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5708 @cindex arithmetic operators
5709 @cindex precedence in expressions
5710 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5711 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5712 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5713 @ifnottex
5714 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5715 @smallexample
5716 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5717 (highest)
5718 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5719 2 left * / %
5720 3 left + -
5721 4 left >> <<
5722 5 left == != > < <= >=
5723 6 left &
5724 7 left |
5725 8 left &&
5726 9 left ||
5727 10 right ? :
5728 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5729 (lowest)
5730 @end smallexample
5731 Notes:
5732 (1) Prefix operators
5733 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5734 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5735 @end ifnottex
5736 @tex
5737 \vskip \baselineskip
5738 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5739 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5740 \hrule
5741 \halign
5742 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5743 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5744 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5745 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5746 \noalign{\hrule}
5747 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5748 &highest&&&&&\cr
5749 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5750 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5751 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5752 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5753 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5754 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5755 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5756 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5757 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5758 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5759 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5760 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5761 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5762 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5763 \hrule}
5764 @end tex
5765 @iftex
5766 {
5767 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5768 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5769 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5770 }
5771 @end iftex
5772 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5773
5774 @node Evaluation
5775 @subsection Evaluation
5776 @cindex lazy evaluation
5777 @cindex expression evaluation order
5778 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5779 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5780
5781 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5782 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5783 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5784 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5785
5786 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5787 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5788 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5789 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5790
5791 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5792 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5793 allocation.
5794
5795 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5796 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5797
5798 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5799 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5800 following
5801 @smallexample
5802 @group
5803 SECTIONS
5804 @{
5805 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5806 @{ *(.text) @}
5807 @}
5808 @end group
5809 @end smallexample
5810 @noindent
5811 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5812 address}.
5813
5814 @node Expression Section
5815 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5816 @cindex expression sections
5817 @cindex absolute expressions
5818 @cindex relative expressions
5819 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5820 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5821 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5822 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5823 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5824 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5825 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5826 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5827 operations.
5828
5829 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5830 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5831 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5832 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5833 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5834 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5835 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5836 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5837 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5838 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5839 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5840 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5841 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5842 everywhere.
5843
5844 In the following simple example,
5845
5846 @smallexample
5847 @group
5848 SECTIONS
5849 @{
5850 . = 0x100;
5851 __executable_start = 0x100;
5852 .data :
5853 @{
5854 . = 0x10;
5855 __data_start = 0x10;
5856 *(.data)
5857 @}
5858 @dots{}
5859 @}
5860 @end group
5861 @end smallexample
5862
5863 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5864 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5865 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5866 section in the second two assignments.
5867
5868 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5869 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5870
5871 @itemize @bullet
5872 @item
5873 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5874 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5875 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5876 @item
5877 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5878 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5879 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5880 @item
5881 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5882 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5883 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5884 before applying the operator.
5885 @end itemize
5886
5887 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5888
5889 @itemize @bullet
5890 @item
5891 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5892 @item
5893 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5894 @item
5895 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5896 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5897 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5898 @item
5899 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5900 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5901 section as the relative operand(s).
5902 @item
5903 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5904 conversions) is an absolute address.
5905 @end itemize
5906
5907 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5908 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5909 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5910 section @samp{.data}:
5911 @smallexample
5912 SECTIONS
5913 @{
5914 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5915 @}
5916 @end smallexample
5917 @noindent
5918 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5919 @samp{.data} section.
5920
5921 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5922 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5923
5924 @node Builtin Functions
5925 @subsection Builtin Functions
5926 @cindex functions in expressions
5927 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5928 use in linker script expressions.
5929
5930 @table @code
5931 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5932 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5933 @cindex expression, absolute
5934 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5935 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5936 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5937 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5938
5939 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5940 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5941 @cindex section address in expression
5942 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5943 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5944 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5945 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5946 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5947 the other two will be absolute:
5948 @smallexample
5949 @group
5950 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5951 .output1 :
5952 @{
5953 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5954 @dots{}
5955 @}
5956 .output :
5957 @{
5958 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5959 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5960 @}
5961 @dots{} @}
5962 @end group
5963 @end smallexample
5964
5965 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5966 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5967 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5968 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5969 @cindex round up location counter
5970 @cindex align location counter
5971 @cindex round up expression
5972 @cindex align expression
5973 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5974 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5975 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5976 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5977 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5978 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5979
5980 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5981 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5982 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5983 input sections:
5984 @smallexample
5985 @group
5986 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5987 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5988 *(.data)
5989 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5990 @}
5991 @dots{} @}
5992 @end group
5993 @end smallexample
5994 @noindent
5995 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5996 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5997 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5998 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5999
6000 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6001
6002 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6003 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6004 @cindex section alignment
6005 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6006 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6007 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6008 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6009 value in that section.
6010 @smallexample
6011 @group
6012 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6013 .output @{
6014 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6015 @dots{}
6016 @}
6017 @dots{} @}
6018 @end group
6019 @end smallexample
6020
6021 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6022 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6023 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6024 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6025 section.
6026
6027 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6028 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6029 This is equivalent to either
6030 @smallexample
6031 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6032 @end smallexample
6033 or
6034 @smallexample
6035 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6036 @end smallexample
6037 @noindent
6038 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6039 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6040 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6041 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6042 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6043 bytes in the on-disk file.
6044
6045 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6046 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6047 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6048 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6049 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6050
6051 @noindent
6052 Example:
6053 @smallexample
6054 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6055 @end smallexample
6056
6057 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6058 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6059 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6060 evaluation purposes.
6061
6062 @smallexample
6063 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6064 @end smallexample
6065
6066 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6067 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6068 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6069 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6070 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6071 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6072 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6073 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6074 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6075 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6076 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6077 section alignment.
6078
6079 @smallexample
6080 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6081 @end smallexample
6082
6083 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6084 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6085 @cindex symbol defaults
6086 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6087 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6088 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6089 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6090 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6091 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6092 existed, its value is preserved:
6093
6094 @smallexample
6095 @group
6096 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6097 .text : @{
6098 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6099 @dots{}
6100 @}
6101 @dots{}
6102 @}
6103 @end group
6104 @end smallexample
6105
6106 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6107 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6108 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6109
6110 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6111 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6112 @cindex section load address in expression
6113 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6114 Section LMA}).
6115
6116 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6117 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6118 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6119 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6120
6121 @kindex MAX
6122 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6123 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6124
6125 @kindex MIN
6126 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6127 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6128
6129 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6130 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6131 @cindex unallocated address, next
6132 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6133 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6134 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6135 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6136
6137 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6138 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6139 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6140
6141 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6142 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6143 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6144 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6145 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6146 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6147 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6148 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6149 name.
6150
6151 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6152 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6153 @cindex section size
6154 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6155 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6156 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6157 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6158 @smallexample
6159 @group
6160 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6161 .output @{
6162 .start = . ;
6163 @dots{}
6164 .end = . ;
6165 @}
6166 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6167 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6168 @dots{} @}
6169 @end group
6170 @end smallexample
6171
6172 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6173 @itemx sizeof_headers
6174 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6175 @cindex header size
6176 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6177 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6178 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6179 choose, to facilitate paging.
6180
6181 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6182 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6183 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6184 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6185 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6186 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6187 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6188 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6189 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6190 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6191 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6192 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6193 @end table
6194
6195 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6196 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6197 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6198 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6199 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6200 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6201 linker will report an error.
6202
6203 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6204
6205 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6206 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6207 commands.
6208
6209 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6210 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6211 read. This can affect archive searching.
6212
6213 @ifset GENERIC
6214 @node Machine Dependent
6215 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6216
6217 @cindex machine dependencies
6218 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6219 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6220 functionality are not listed.
6221
6222 @menu
6223 @ifset H8300
6224 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6225 @end ifset
6226 @ifset I960
6227 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6228 @end ifset
6229 @ifset M68HC11
6230 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6231 @end ifset
6232 @ifset ARM
6233 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6234 @end ifset
6235 @ifset HPPA
6236 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6237 @end ifset
6238 @ifset M68K
6239 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6240 @end ifset
6241 @ifset MIPS
6242 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6243 @end ifset
6244 @ifset MMIX
6245 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6246 @end ifset
6247 @ifset MSP430
6248 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6249 @end ifset
6250 @ifset NDS32
6251 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6252 @end ifset
6253 @ifset NIOSII
6254 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6255 @end ifset
6256 @ifset POWERPC
6257 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6258 @end ifset
6259 @ifset POWERPC64
6260 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6261 @end ifset
6262 @ifset SPU
6263 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6264 @end ifset
6265 @ifset TICOFF
6266 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6267 @end ifset
6268 @ifset WIN32
6269 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6270 @end ifset
6271 @ifset XTENSA
6272 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6273 @end ifset
6274 @end menu
6275 @end ifset
6276
6277 @ifset H8300
6278 @ifclear GENERIC
6279 @raisesections
6280 @end ifclear
6281
6282 @node H8/300
6283 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6284
6285 @cindex H8/300 support
6286 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6287 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6288
6289 @table @emph
6290 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6291 @item relaxing address modes
6292 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6293 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6294 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6295 respectively.
6296
6297 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6298 @item synthesizing instructions
6299 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6300 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6301 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6302 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6303 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6304 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6305 top page of memory).
6306
6307 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6308 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6309 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6310 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6311 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6312 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6313 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6314
6315 @item bit manipulation instructions
6316 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6317 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6318 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6319 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6320 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6321 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6322 the top page of memory).
6323
6324 @item system control instructions
6325 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6326 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6327 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6328 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6329 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6330 the top page of memory).
6331 @end table
6332
6333 @ifclear GENERIC
6334 @lowersections
6335 @end ifclear
6336 @end ifset
6337
6338 @ifclear GENERIC
6339 @ifset Renesas
6340 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6341 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6342 @node Renesas
6343 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6344
6345 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6346 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6347 options are required for these chips.
6348 @end ifset
6349 @end ifclear
6350
6351 @ifset I960
6352 @ifclear GENERIC
6353 @raisesections
6354 @end ifclear
6355
6356 @node i960
6357 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6358
6359 @cindex i960 support
6360
6361 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6362 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6363 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6364 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6365 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6366 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6367 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6368
6369 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6370 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6371 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6372 the names
6373
6374 @smallexample
6375 @group
6376 try
6377 libtry.a
6378 tryca
6379 libtryca.a
6380 @end group
6381 @end smallexample
6382
6383 @noindent
6384 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6385 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6386
6387 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6388 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6389 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6390 specifies a library.
6391
6392 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6393 @cindex relaxing on i960
6394 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6395 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6396 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6397 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6398 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6399 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6400 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6401 not itself call any subroutines).
6402
6403 @ifclear GENERIC
6404 @lowersections
6405 @end ifclear
6406 @end ifset
6407
6408 @ifset ARM
6409 @ifclear GENERIC
6410 @raisesections
6411 @end ifclear
6412
6413 @ifset M68HC11
6414 @ifclear GENERIC
6415 @raisesections
6416 @end ifclear
6417
6418 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6419 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6420
6421 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6422
6423 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6424
6425 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6426 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6427
6428 @table @emph
6429 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6430 @item relaxing address modes
6431 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6432 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6433 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6434 respectively.
6435
6436 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6437 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6438 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6439
6440 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6441 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6442 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6443 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6444 @code{bset} instructions.
6445
6446 @end table
6447
6448 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6449
6450 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6451 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6452 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6453 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6454 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6455 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6456 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6457 point to the function trampoline.
6458
6459 @ifclear GENERIC
6460 @lowersections
6461 @end ifclear
6462 @end ifset
6463
6464 @node ARM
6465 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6466
6467 @cindex ARM interworking support
6468 @kindex --support-old-code
6469 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6470 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6471 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6472 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6473 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6474 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6475 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6476 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6477 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6478 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6479
6480 @cindex thumb entry point
6481 @cindex entry point, thumb
6482 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6483 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6484 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6485 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6486 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6487 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6488
6489 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6490 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6491 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6492 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6493 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6494 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6495
6496 @cindex BE8
6497 @kindex --be8
6498 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6499 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6500 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6501 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6502 little-endian code.
6503
6504 @cindex TARGET1
6505 @kindex --target1-rel
6506 @kindex --target1-abs
6507 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6508 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6509 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6510 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6511
6512 @cindex TARGET2
6513 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6514 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6515 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6516 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6517 @table @samp
6518 @item rel
6519 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6520 @item abs
6521 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6522 @item got-rel
6523 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6524 @end table
6525
6526 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6527 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6528 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6529 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6530 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6531 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6532
6533 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6534 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6535 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6536
6537 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6538 relocations are ignored.
6539
6540 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6541 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6542 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6543 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6544
6545 @smallexample
6546 TST rM, #1
6547 MOVEQ PC, rM
6548 BX Rn
6549 @end smallexample
6550
6551 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6552 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6553 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6554
6555 @cindex USE_BLX
6556 @kindex --use-blx
6557 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6558 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6559 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6560 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6561 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6562
6563 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6564 specify it if you are using that target.
6565
6566 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6567 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6568 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6569 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6570 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6571 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6572 the support code can read the intended values.
6573
6574 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6575 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6576 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6577 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6578 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6579 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6580
6581 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6582 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6583 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6584 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6585 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6586 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6587
6588 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6589 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6590 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6591 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6592 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6593 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6594 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6595
6596 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6597 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6598 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6599 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6600 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6601 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6602 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6603
6604 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6605 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6606 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6607
6608 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6609 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6610 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6611 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6612 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6613 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6614 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6615 not be diagnosed.
6616
6617 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6618 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6619 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6620 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6621 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6622 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6623 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6624
6625 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6626 @kindex --pic-veneer
6627 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6628 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6629 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6630 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6631
6632 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6633 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6634 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6635 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6636 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6637 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6638 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6639 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6640 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6641 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6642 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6643 where they should be placed.
6644
6645 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6646 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6647 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6648 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6649 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6650 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6651 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6652 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6653 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6654 from the input sections.
6655
6656 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6657 @samp{N = +1}.
6658
6659 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6660 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6661 otherwise.
6662
6663 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6664 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6665 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6666 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6667
6668 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6669
6670 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6671 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6672 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6673 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6674
6675 Please contact ARM for further details.
6676
6677 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6678 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6679 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6680 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6681
6682 @kindex --long-plt
6683 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6684 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6685 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6686 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6687
6688 @ifclear GENERIC
6689 @lowersections
6690 @end ifclear
6691 @end ifset
6692
6693 @ifset HPPA
6694 @ifclear GENERIC
6695 @raisesections
6696 @end ifclear
6697
6698 @node HPPA ELF32
6699 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6700 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6701 @kindex --multi-subspace
6702 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6703 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6704 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6705 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6706 multiple sub-spaces.
6707
6708 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6709 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6710 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6711 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6712 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6713 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6714 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6715 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6716 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6717 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6718 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6719 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6720 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6721 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6722 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6723 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6724
6725 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6726 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6727 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6728 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6729
6730 @ifclear GENERIC
6731 @lowersections
6732 @end ifclear
6733 @end ifset
6734
6735 @ifset M68K
6736 @ifclear GENERIC
6737 @raisesections
6738 @end ifclear
6739
6740 @node M68K
6741 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6742
6743 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6744 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6745 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6746 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6747 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6748 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6749 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6750 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6751 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6752 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6753 support such GOTs.
6754 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6755 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6756 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6757 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6758
6759 @ifclear GENERIC
6760 @lowersections
6761 @end ifclear
6762 @end ifset
6763
6764 @ifset MIPS
6765 @ifclear GENERIC
6766 @raisesections
6767 @end ifclear
6768
6769 @node MIPS
6770 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6771
6772 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6773 @kindex --insn32
6774 @kindex --no-insn32
6775 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6776 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6777 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6778 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6779 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6780 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6781
6782 @ifclear GENERIC
6783 @lowersections
6784 @end ifclear
6785 @end ifset
6786
6787 @ifset MMIX
6788 @ifclear GENERIC
6789 @raisesections
6790 @end ifclear
6791
6792 @node MMIX
6793 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6794 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6795 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6796 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6797 can translate between the two formats.
6798
6799 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6800 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6801 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6802 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6803 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6804 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6805 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6806 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6807
6808 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6809 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6810 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6811 of a section.
6812
6813 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6814 are left out from an mmo file.
6815
6816 @ifclear GENERIC
6817 @lowersections
6818 @end ifclear
6819 @end ifset
6820
6821 @ifset MSP430
6822 @ifclear GENERIC
6823 @raisesections
6824 @end ifclear
6825
6826 @node MSP430
6827 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6828 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6829 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6830 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6831
6832 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6833 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6834
6835 @table @code
6836 @item @samp{.vectors}
6837 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6838
6839 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6840 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6841 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6842
6843 @item @samp{.infomem}
6844 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6845 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6846
6847 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6848 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6849 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6850
6851 @item @samp{.noinit}
6852 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6853
6854 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6855 @end table
6856
6857 @ifclear GENERIC
6858 @lowersections
6859 @end ifclear
6860 @end ifset
6861
6862 @ifset NDS32
6863 @ifclear GENERIC
6864 @raisesections
6865 @end ifclear
6866
6867 @node NDS32
6868 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6869 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6870 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6871 relaxes objects according to these options.
6872
6873 @table @code
6874 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6875 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6876
6877 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6878 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6879
6880 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6881 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6882
6883 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6884 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6885
6886 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6887 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6888
6889 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6890 Update the existing EX9 table.
6891
6892 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6893 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6894
6895 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6896 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6897
6898 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6899 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6900
6901 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6902 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6903 @end table
6904
6905 @ifclear GENERIC
6906 @lowersections
6907 @end ifclear
6908 @end ifset
6909
6910 @ifset NIOSII
6911 @ifclear GENERIC
6912 @raisesections
6913 @end ifclear
6914
6915 @node Nios II
6916 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6917 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6918 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6919
6920 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6921 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6922 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6923 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6924 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6925 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6926 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6927 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6928 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6929 larger than 256MB.
6930
6931 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6932 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6933 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6934 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6935 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6936 register as a temporary.
6937
6938 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6939 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6940 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6941
6942 @ifclear GENERIC
6943 @lowersections
6944 @end ifclear
6945 @end ifset
6946
6947 @ifset POWERPC
6948 @ifclear GENERIC
6949 @raisesections
6950 @end ifclear
6951
6952 @node PowerPC ELF32
6953 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6954 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6955 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6956 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6957 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6958 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6959 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6960 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6961 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6962 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6963 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6964 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6965 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6966
6967 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6968 @table @option
6969 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6970 @kindex --bss-plt
6971 @item --bss-plt
6972 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6973 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6974 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6975 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6976 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6977 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6978 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6979 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6980
6981 @kindex --secure-plt
6982 @item --secure-plt
6983 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6984 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6985 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6986 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6987 style BSS PLT.
6988
6989 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6990 @kindex --sdata-got
6991 @item --sdata-got
6992 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6993 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6994 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6995 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6996 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6997 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6998 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6999 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7000 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7001 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7002 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7003 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7004
7005 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7006 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7007 @item --emit-stub-syms
7008 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7009 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7010
7011 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7012 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7013 @item --no-tls-optimize
7014 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7015 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7016 disable the optimization.
7017 @end table
7018
7019 @ifclear GENERIC
7020 @lowersections
7021 @end ifclear
7022 @end ifset
7023
7024 @ifset POWERPC64
7025 @ifclear GENERIC
7026 @raisesections
7027 @end ifclear
7028
7029 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7030 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7031
7032 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7033 @table @option
7034 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7035 @kindex --stub-group-size
7036 @item --stub-group-size
7037 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7038 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7039 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7040 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7041 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7042 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7043 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7044 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7045 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7046 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7047 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7048 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7049 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7050 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7051
7052 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7053 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7054 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7055 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7056
7057 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7058 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7059 @item --emit-stub-syms
7060 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7061 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7062
7063 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7064 @kindex --dotsyms
7065 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7066 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7067 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7068 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7069 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7070 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7071 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7072 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7073 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7074 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7075 feature.
7076
7077 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7078 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7079 @item --no-tls-optimize
7080 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7081 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7082 disable the optimization.
7083
7084 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7085 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7086 @item --no-opd-optimize
7087 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7088 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7089 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7090 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7091
7092 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7093 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7094 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7095 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7096 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7097 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7098 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7099
7100 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7101 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7102 @item --no-toc-optimize
7103 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7104 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7105 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7106 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7107 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7108 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7109 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7110 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7111 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7112 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7113 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7114 optimization.
7115
7116 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7117 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7118 @item --no-multi-toc
7119 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7120 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7121 where TOC
7122 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7123 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7124 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7125 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7126 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7127 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7128 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7129 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7130
7131 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7132 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7133 @item --no-toc-sort
7134 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7135 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7136 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7137 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7138 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7139 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7140 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7141 off this feature.
7142
7143 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7144 @kindex --plt-align
7145 @kindex --no-plt-align
7146 @item --plt-align
7147 @itemx --no-plt-align
7148 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7149 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7150 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7151 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7152 stubs are packed tightly.
7153
7154 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7155 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7156 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7157 @item --plt-static-chain
7158 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7159 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7160 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7161 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7162
7163 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7164 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7165 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7166 @item --plt-thread-safe
7167 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7168 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7169 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7170 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7171 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7172 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7173 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7174 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7175 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7176 default behaviour.
7177 @end table
7178
7179 @ifclear GENERIC
7180 @lowersections
7181 @end ifclear
7182 @end ifset
7183
7184 @ifset SPU
7185 @ifclear GENERIC
7186 @raisesections
7187 @end ifclear
7188
7189 @node SPU ELF
7190 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7191
7192 @cindex SPU ELF options
7193 @table @option
7194
7195 @cindex SPU plugins
7196 @kindex --plugin
7197 @item --plugin
7198 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7199
7200 @cindex SPU overlays
7201 @kindex --no-overlays
7202 @item --no-overlays
7203 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7204 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7205 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7206 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7207
7208 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7209 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7210 @item --emit-stub-syms
7211 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7212 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7213
7214 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7215 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7216 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7217 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7218 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7219 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7220
7221 @cindex SPU local store size
7222 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7223 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7224 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7225 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7226 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7227
7228 @cindex SPU
7229 @kindex --stack-analysis
7230 @item --stack-analysis
7231 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7232 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7233 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7234 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7235 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7236 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7237 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7238 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7239 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7240 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7241 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7242 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7243 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7244 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7245 and calls will be given.
7246
7247 @cindex SPU
7248 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7249 @item --emit-stack-syms
7250 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7251 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7252 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7253 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7254 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7255 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7256 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7257 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7258 @end table
7259
7260 @ifclear GENERIC
7261 @lowersections
7262 @end ifclear
7263 @end ifset
7264
7265 @ifset TICOFF
7266 @ifclear GENERIC
7267 @raisesections
7268 @end ifclear
7269
7270 @node TI COFF
7271 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7272 @cindex TI COFF versions
7273 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7274 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7275 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7276 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7277 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7278 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7279
7280 @ifclear GENERIC
7281 @lowersections
7282 @end ifclear
7283 @end ifset
7284
7285 @ifset WIN32
7286 @ifclear GENERIC
7287 @raisesections
7288 @end ifclear
7289
7290 @node WIN32
7291 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7292
7293 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7294 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7295 command line options mentioned here.
7296
7297 @table @emph
7298 @cindex import libraries
7299 @item import libraries
7300 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7301 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7302 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7303 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7304 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7305 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7306
7307 @item exporting DLL symbols
7308 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7309 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7310
7311 @table @emph
7312 @item using auto-export functionality
7313 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7314 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7315 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7316
7317 @itemize
7318 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7319 @item --exclude-symbols
7320 @item --exclude-libs
7321 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7322 @item --version-script
7323 @end itemize
7324
7325 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7326 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7327 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7328 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7329 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7330 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7331 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7332 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7333
7334 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7335 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7336 if either of the following are true:
7337
7338 @itemize
7339 @item A DEF file is used.
7340 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7341 @end itemize
7342
7343 @item using a DEF file
7344 @cindex using a DEF file
7345 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7346 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7347 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7348 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7349 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7350
7351 @example
7352 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7353 @end example
7354
7355 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7356 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7357
7358 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7359
7360 @example
7361 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7362
7363 EXPORTS
7364 foo
7365 bar
7366 _bar = bar
7367 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7368 var1 DATA
7369 doo = foo == foo2
7370 eoo DATA == var1
7371 @end example
7372
7373 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7374 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7375 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7376 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7377 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7378 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7379 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7380 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7381 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7382
7383 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7384 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7385 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7386
7387 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7388 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7389 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7390 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7391
7392 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7393 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7394 non-default base address for the image.
7395
7396 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7397 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7398 filename specified on the command line.
7399
7400 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7401
7402 @example
7403 EXPORTS
7404 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7405 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7406 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7407 @end example
7408
7409 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7410 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7411 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7412 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7413 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7414 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7415 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7416
7417 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7418
7419 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7420 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7421 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7422 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7423 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7424
7425 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7426 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7427 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7428 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7429
7430 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7431 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7432 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7433 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7434 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7435 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7436 application will behave unexpectedly.
7437
7438 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7439 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7440 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7441 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7442 the DLL without an import library.
7443
7444 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7445 other DEF file statements
7446
7447 @cindex creating a DEF file
7448 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7449 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7450
7451 @item Using decorations
7452 @cindex Using decorations
7453 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7454 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7455 declared as:
7456
7457 @example
7458 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7459 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7460 @end example
7461
7462 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7463 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7464 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7465 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7466
7467 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7468 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7469 instead:
7470
7471 @example
7472 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7473 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7474 @end example
7475
7476 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7477 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7478 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7479 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7480 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7481 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7482 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7483 information.
7484 @end table
7485
7486 @cindex automatic data imports
7487 @item automatic data imports
7488 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7489 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7490 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7491 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7492 code to these platforms, especially for large
7493 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7494 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7495 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7496 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7497 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7498 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7499 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7500 trigger the feature's use.
7501
7502 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7503 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7504
7505 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7506 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7507
7508 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7509 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7510 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7511 below.
7512
7513 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7514 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7515 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7516 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7517 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7518 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7519 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7520 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7521 references.
7522
7523 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7524 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7525 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7526 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7527 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7528 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7529 run without error on an older system.
7530
7531 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7532 enabled as needed.
7533
7534 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7535 @item direct linking to a dll
7536 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7537 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7538 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7539 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7540 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7541 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7542 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7543 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7544 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7545 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7546
7547 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7548 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7549 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7550 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7551 select the dll instead of an import library.
7552
7553
7554 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7555 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7556
7557 @example
7558 libxxx.dll.a
7559 xxx.dll.a
7560 libxxx.a
7561 xxx.lib
7562 cygxxx.dll (*)
7563 libxxx.dll
7564 xxx.dll
7565 @end example
7566
7567 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7568
7569 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7570 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7571 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7572 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7573 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7574
7575 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7576 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7577 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7578 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7579 could coexist on the same machine.
7580
7581 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7582 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7583 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7584
7585 @example
7586 bin/
7587 cygxxx.dll
7588 lib/
7589 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7590 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7591 @end example
7592
7593 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7594 done two ways:
7595
7596 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7597 @example
7598 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7599 @end example
7600
7601 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7602 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7603 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7604 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7605
7606 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7607 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7608 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7609 making the app/dll.
7610
7611 @example
7612 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7613 @end example
7614
7615 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7616
7617 @example
7618 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7619 @end example
7620
7621 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7622 perfectly legal
7623
7624 @example
7625 bin/
7626 cygxxx-5.dll
7627 lib/
7628 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7629 @end example
7630
7631 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7632 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7633 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7634
7635 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7636 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7637
7638 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7639 work with auto-imported data.
7640
7641 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7642 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7643 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7644 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7645 possible to do this without an import lib.
7646
7647 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7648 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7649 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7650 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7651
7652 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7653 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7654 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7655 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7656 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7657 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7658 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7659
7660 @item symbol aliasing
7661 @table @emph
7662 @item adding additional names
7663 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7664 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7665 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7666 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7667 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7668
7669 @example
7670 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7671
7672 EXPORTS
7673 foo
7674 _foo = foo
7675 @end example
7676
7677 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7678
7679 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7680 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7681
7682 @example
7683 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7684 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7685 @end example
7686
7687 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7688 symbols.
7689
7690 @item renaming symbols
7691 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7692 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7693 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7694 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7695 created). In the following example:
7696
7697 @example
7698 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7699
7700 EXPORTS
7701 _foo = foo
7702 @end example
7703
7704 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7705 @samp{_foo}.
7706 @end table
7707
7708 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7709 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7710 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7711 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7712 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7713 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7714 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7715 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7716 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7717 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7718 which is probably not what you wanted.
7719
7720 @cindex weak externals
7721 @item weak externals
7722 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7723 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7724 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7725 are three variants of weak externals:
7726 @itemize
7727 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7728 called lazy externals.
7729 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7730 This form is not presently implemented.
7731 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7732 implemented.
7733 @end itemize
7734 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7735 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7736 uses a default value.
7737
7738 @cindex aligned common symbols
7739 @item aligned common symbols
7740 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7741 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7742 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7743 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7744 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7745 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7746 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7747 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7748
7749 @end table
7750
7751 @ifclear GENERIC
7752 @lowersections
7753 @end ifclear
7754 @end ifset
7755
7756 @ifset XTENSA
7757 @ifclear GENERIC
7758 @raisesections
7759 @end ifclear
7760
7761 @node Xtensa
7762 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7763
7764 @cindex Xtensa processors
7765 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7766 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7767 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7768 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7769 example, with the command:
7770
7771 @smallexample
7772 SECTIONS
7773 @{
7774 .text : @{
7775 *(.literal .text)
7776 @}
7777 @}
7778 @end smallexample
7779
7780 @noindent
7781 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7782 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7783 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7784 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7785 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7786 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7787 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7788
7789 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7790 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7791 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7792 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7793 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7794 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7795 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7796 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7797 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7798 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7799 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7800 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7801
7802 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7803 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7804 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7805 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7806 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7807 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7808 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7809 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7810 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7811 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7812 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7813 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7814 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7815 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7816
7817 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7818 control the linker:
7819
7820 @cindex Xtensa options
7821 @table @option
7822 @item --size-opt
7823 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7824 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7825 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7826 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7827 preserve the correctness of the code.
7828 @end table
7829
7830 @ifclear GENERIC
7831 @lowersections
7832 @end ifclear
7833 @end ifset
7834
7835 @ifclear SingleFormat
7836 @node BFD
7837 @chapter BFD
7838
7839 @cindex back end
7840 @cindex object file management
7841 @cindex object formats available
7842 @kindex objdump -i
7843 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7844 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7845 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7846 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7847 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7848 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7849 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7850 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7851 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7852
7853 @cindex BFD requirements
7854 @cindex requirements for BFD
7855 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7856 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7857 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7858 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7859 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7860 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7861 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7862
7863 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7864 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7865 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7866 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7867
7868 @menu
7869 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7870 @end menu
7871
7872 @node BFD outline
7873 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7874 @cindex opening object files
7875 @include bfdsumm.texi
7876 @end ifclear
7877
7878 @node Reporting Bugs
7879 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7880 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7881 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7882
7883 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7884
7885 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7886 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7887 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7888 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7889 @command{ld}.
7890
7891 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7892 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7893
7894 @menu
7895 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7896 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7897 @end menu
7898
7899 @node Bug Criteria
7900 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7901 @cindex bug criteria
7902
7903 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7904
7905 @itemize @bullet
7906 @cindex fatal signal
7907 @cindex linker crash
7908 @cindex crash of linker
7909 @item
7910 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7911 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7912
7913 @cindex error on valid input
7914 @item
7915 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7916
7917 @cindex invalid input
7918 @item
7919 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7920 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7921 object files are correct.
7922
7923 @item
7924 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7925 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7926 @end itemize
7927
7928 @node Bug Reporting
7929 @section How to Report Bugs
7930 @cindex bug reports
7931 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7932
7933 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7934 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7935 recommend you contact that organization first.
7936
7937 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7938 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7939 distribution.
7940
7941 @ifset BUGURL
7942 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7943 @value{BUGURL}.
7944 @end ifset
7945
7946 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7947 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7948 fact or leave it out, state it!
7949
7950 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7951 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7952 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7953 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7954 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7955 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7956 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7957 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7958 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7959 and the most helpful.
7960
7961 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7962 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7963 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7964
7965 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7966 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7967 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7968 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7969
7970 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7971
7972 @itemize @bullet
7973 @item
7974 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7975 the @samp{--version} argument.
7976
7977 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7978 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7979
7980 @item
7981 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7982 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7983
7984 @item
7985 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7986 version number.
7987
7988 @item
7989 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7990 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7991
7992 @item
7993 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7994 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7995 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7996 sufficient.
7997
7998 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7999 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8000
8001 @item
8002 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8003 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8004 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8005 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8006 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8007 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8008 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8009 attachments are best.
8010
8011 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8012 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8013 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8014 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8015 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8016
8017 @item
8018 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8019 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8020
8021 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8022 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8023 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8024 a chance to make a mistake.
8025
8026 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8027 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8028 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8029 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8030 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8031 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8032 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8033 any conclusion from our observations.
8034
8035 @item
8036 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8037 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8038 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8039 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8040 context, not by line number.
8041
8042 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8043 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8044 @end itemize
8045
8046 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8047
8048 @itemize @bullet
8049 @item
8050 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8051
8052 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8053 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8054 changes will not affect it.
8055
8056 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8057 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8058 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8059 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8060
8061 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8062 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8063 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8064 less time, and so on.
8065
8066 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8067 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8068
8069 @item
8070 A patch for the bug.
8071
8072 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8073 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8074 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8075 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8076
8077 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8078 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8079 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8080 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8081 fixed.
8082
8083 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8084 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8085 help us to understand.
8086
8087 @item
8088 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8089
8090 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8091 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8092 @end itemize
8093
8094 @node MRI
8095 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8096 @cindex MRI compatibility
8097 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8098 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8099 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8100 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8101 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8102 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8103 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8104
8105 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8106 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8107 features to make use of them.
8108
8109 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8110 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8111
8112 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8113 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8114 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8115 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8116 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8117
8118 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8119
8120 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8121 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8122 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8123
8124 @table @code
8125 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8126 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8127 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8128 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8129 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8130 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8131 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8132 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8133 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8134 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8135 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8136
8137 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8138 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8139 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8140 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8141
8142 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8143
8144 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8145 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8146 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8147 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8148
8149 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8150 @item BASE @var{expression}
8151 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8152 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8153
8154 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8155 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8156 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8157 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8158
8159 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8160 @item END
8161 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8162
8163 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8164 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8165 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8166 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8167
8168 @enumerate
8169 @item
8170 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8171
8172 @item
8173 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8174
8175 @item
8176 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8177 @samp{COFF}
8178 @end enumerate
8179
8180 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8181 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8182 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8183 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8184
8185 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8186 same line, with no change in its effect.
8187
8188 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8189 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8190 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8191 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8192 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8193 command line.
8194
8195 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8196 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8197 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8198 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8199 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8200
8201 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8202 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8203 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8204 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8205 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8206 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8207 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8208 file, in the order specified.
8209
8210 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8211 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8212 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8213 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8214 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8215 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8216
8217 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8218 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8219 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8220 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8221 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8222 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8223 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8224 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8225 @end table
8226
8227 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8228 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8229 @include fdl.texi
8230
8231 @node LD Index
8232 @unnumbered LD Index
8233
8234 @printindex cp
8235
8236 @tex
8237 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8238 % meantime:
8239 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8240 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8241 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8242 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8243 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8244 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8245 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8246 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8247 \page\colophon
8248 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8249 @end tex
8250
8251 @bye